<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Julien</id>
	<title>WikInsituEn - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Julien"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Julien"/>
	<updated>2026-04-23T12:03:30Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.38.4</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Vendre&amp;diff=916</id>
		<title>En Vendre</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Vendre&amp;diff=916"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:13:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: Undo revision 914 by Julien (talk)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;barre_menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;entetehome3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:vendre.png|center|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;titrehome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Selling&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding: 10px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold; color: #5a5959;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Détail du parcours&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Pre-requirements]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Adding the priced articles]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Creating a pricing catalogue (placement, delivery…)]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Visualising pricing]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Modifying pricing]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Calculating set prices]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Not billing an article]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Controlling prices]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Generating Client documents]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Generating Supplier documents]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-top: 15px; margin-bottom: 15px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_wiki_menu.gif|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[http://wiki.insitu.education Accueil WikInSitu]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Vendre&amp;diff=914</id>
		<title>En Vendre</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=En_Vendre&amp;diff=914"/>
		<updated>2024-08-08T12:12:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;barre_menu&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td style=&amp;quot;border: 1px solid #aaaaaa;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;entetehome3&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:vendre.png|center|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;titrehome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Verkopen&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding: 10px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;font-weight: bold; color: #5a5959;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Details van het parcours&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Vereisten]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Versleutelde items toevoegen]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Een kostprijscatalogus maken (plaatsing, levering, etc.)]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Kostprijs bekijken]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[De prijs aanpassen]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Vaste prijzen berekenen]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Geen kosten in rekening brengen voor een artikel]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[De prijs controleren]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Klantdocumenten genereren]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Leveranciersdocumenten genereren]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_fleche_menu.png|link=]] [[Een leveranciersbestelling plaatsen in EDI]]&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;hr width=&amp;quot;95%&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;margin-top: 15px; margin-bottom: 15px;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;[[Image:Logo_wiki_menu.gif|link=]] &amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;[https://nl.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Hoofdpagina Home WikInSitu]&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modify_finishes&amp;diff=905</id>
		<title>Modify finishes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Modify_finishes&amp;diff=905"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:31:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Modify finishes&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oTp5B-rP1Xk&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=1&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At any point when designing your layout, you can come back on your generic features to apply changes in your project, by modifying your choice of colours / models or adding a colour / model so as to mix several different finishes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Switching the entire project to a new finish===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- Choose '''Scene | Generic finishes''' or click on the shortcut icon[[Image:IconeFinition.png|link=]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The finishes window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FinitionsGénérique1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pick a new model or new colour and validate this new window. InSitu will then modify all the furniture based on your choices. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The perspective will be redrawn with the new façades. If the new model belongs to a different price group compared to the old model, then the total price of the scene displated in the status bar will be updated. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Creating a colour mix===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on '''new''' to create a new finish while keeping the old one. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the information of the model and the different colours and click on OK&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the finish of a piece of furniture, right click on the piece of furniture, then on &amp;quot;finishes&amp;quot; and choose the new finish in &amp;quot;Scene generics&amp;quot;: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:FinitionsGénérique2_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to apply it to all the furniture, you can choose '''all''' in '''paste finishes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing technical symbols|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=904</id>
		<title>Placing the floor and ceiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=904"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:31:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing the floor and ceiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a floor or a ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place a floor (or a ceiling) as soon as you start designing the layout of your room in the &amp;quot;New scene&amp;quot; dialog box, as long as you placed the walls in the same dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, when creating more complex scenes, there is a different method for placing floors and ceilings. You can place them at any time, as long as the walls have been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- Select one wall by clicking on it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2- Perform a right click on your mouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3- Use the &amp;quot;shape&amp;quot; feature in the window that pops up. The whole shape of the construction will be displayed along the walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4- In the place window, choose the &amp;quot;@CONSTRAINTS&amp;quot; window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5- Choose the &amp;quot;Floors&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Ceilings&amp;quot; chapter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6- Choose the block you would like, then click &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's important to note that you can place the floor and ceiling in whatever order you like, but you need to make the shape appear once for the floor and once for the ceiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Knowing the floor's surface area===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's always useful to know the floor's total surface area in m². To measure it, select your floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surface area is displayed in the bottom left of the InSitu window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:surfacesol_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to personalise your floor (parquet, tiles), we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a sloping ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The @CONSTRAINTS catalogue contains the article (Sloping ceiling av.fen Applicat), which allows you to set up a sloping ceiling with or without a roof window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to create and personalise your sloping ceiling, we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Sloped wall configurator (Applicat)|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;width:50%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Modify finishes|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_electric_appliances_and_sanitary_facilitiess&amp;diff=903</id>
		<title>Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_electric_appliances_and_sanitary_facilitiess&amp;diff=903"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:30:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4bUAn8E07yU&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing electric appliances===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a few different catalogues to place electric appliances&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;@Electric Appliances : catalogue with 3D version of electric appliances but without prices and without a link to a brand&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand: manufacturer catalogue with prices but without 3D&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand3D: manufacturer catalogue with both prices and 3D&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Oven===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a column oven, the oven will be represented by the visuals of a standard oven without any pricing. You then have two options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- to add the pricing of the oven to your project and keep the default visuals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, search for the desired reference in the manufacturer catalogue of your choice, and place your article in pricing view. If you go through a wholesaler, then it's also possible to place a free article.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- to replace the default visuals with the manufacturer visuals, including the pricing. In this case, you must have the manufacturer's 3D catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
In elevation view, select the default oven, then search for the oven you want to replace it with, in the manufacturer catalogue. Thanks to this icon [[Image:Remplacer.png|link=]], perform the exchange. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro1_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hob and extractor hood===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In top view, search for a hob in the standard catalogue or the manufacturer catalogue of your choice. &lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop the reference above your cooking furniture. Don't worry about the placement height, the hob will be automatically placed on the worktop. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the same for your extractor hood. &lt;br /&gt;
Check the placement height: for the extractor hood, it must be &amp;quot;under&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro2_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once placed, you can centre your hob and extractor hood in relation to your low piece of cooking furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
To make the selection of articles easier, we will use the CTRL + right CLICK feature for this manoeuvre. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, select one or several articles that you want to centre. Do a CTRL + right click above your cooking furniture. The list of articles will appear. Select your hob. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the operation if there are other elements to align (remember to keep the SHIFT key pressed down to select a second element). Here, we shall select the extractor hood. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly, select the article which will serve as a reference, i.e. the low piece of cooking furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the selection menu | choose &amp;quot;horizontally align&amp;quot; and then click on &amp;quot;centre&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro3_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fridge and dishwasher===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of a integrated fridge and dishwasher, hidden by a door, they will always only be priced. All you need to do is click place to include them in your pricing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of a free placing fridge and dishwasher, they will be both drawn and priced as they won't be hidden by a door. You can choose them in the catalogue of your choice and place them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing sanitary facilities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like for the electric appliances, there are several different catalogues to choose from for placing sanitary appliances. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;@Sinks &amp;amp; taps: catalogue with 3D version of sinks and tap, but not priced and not linked to a brand&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand: manufacturer catalogue with priced references, and with or without graphic representations&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The standard sink and tap catalogue allows you to personalise your bowl and tap. To find out how to create and personalise your bowl and tap, we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Sink and faucet configurator (Applicat)|Decorating Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;width:50%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing the floor and ceiling|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=902</id>
		<title>Placing credenzas</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=902"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:28:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing credenzas&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yho-PH9Dwrg&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credenzas===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to place a credenza is to put yourself in elevation view. Once in elevation view, it is easy to get the measurements you need with the help of the measure tool. If you have any doubts about how to use this key tool, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Key tools (measure, move…)#MEASURE TOOL|go to the Measure page]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, we need a credenza that is 2350 mm long and 1284 mm high. Let's choose the credenza in the @Generic Kitchen catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
For manufacturer catalogues, don't hesitate to search for the reference of the desired credenza. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible methods: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drag and drop method:  Enter the dimensions you calculated, then drag the credenza above, in elevation, and release. Your credenza has now been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:crédence1_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a shape: This method is used for creating credenzas that need to be cut out (example cut out around the outline of a window)&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more about shapes, check out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[What is a shape?|Shapes Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. If your credenza is tiled, then check out this page: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Placing wall tiles]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=901</id>
		<title>Placing credenzas</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=901"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:28:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing credenzas&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yho-PH9Dwrg&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credenzas===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to place a credenza is to put yourself in elevation view. Once in elevation view, it is easy to get the measurements you need with the help of the measure tool. If you have any doubts about how to use this key tool, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Key tools (measure, move…)#MEASURE TOOL|go to the Measure page]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, we need a credenza that is 2350 mm long and 1284 mm high. Let's choose the credenza in the @Generic Kitchen catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
For manufacturer catalogues, don't hesitate to search for the reference of the desired credenza. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible methods: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drag and drop method:  Enter the dimensions you calculated, then drag the credenza above, in elevation, and release. Your credenza has now been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:crédence1_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a shape: This method is used for creating credenzas that need to be cut out (example cut out around the outline of a window)&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more about shapes, check out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[What is a shape?|Shapes Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. If your credenza is tiled, then check out this page: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Placing wall tiles]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_automatic_linear_articles&amp;diff=900</id>
		<title>Placing automatic linear articles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_automatic_linear_articles&amp;diff=900"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:26:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing automatic linear articles&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=fJL6nKZyhDU&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=6&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The linear elements of a kitchen are the bases, the worktops, the worktop spaces to be tiled, the light pelmets and the cornices. Except in very particular cases, the placement of linears takes place automatically. To do this: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''1.''' It will allow you to choose the catalogue of origin, the type and the colouring of the linear elements that you want to place.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lineaire1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''2.''' For each of the five different types of linears, choose the colours that you like best. Tick or untick depending on what you want to place in the scene. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''3.''' Click on the &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; button or press on ENTER. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If one or several objects were selected when you clicked on Scene | Automatic linears..., a message box containing &amp;quot;Only for the selected elements?&amp;quot; will appear on your screen. Click on &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; to let InSitu know that it should place the linears on all the objects of the layout or click on &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; if you want the linears to only be placed on the selected elements &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The linear elements corresponding to the ticked boxes in the dialog box will then be placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lineaire2_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing credenzas|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_jambs&amp;diff=899</id>
		<title>Placing jambs</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_jambs&amp;diff=899"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:26:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing jambs&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;	&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yho-PH9Dwrg&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Jambs===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For jambs and panels, the top view is better as the jambs and panels will be set against the furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's take the example of an island. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Search for your jamb reference in your manufacturer catalogue. Then, enter the necessary dimensions (the width corresponds to the thickness of the jamb, it will be entered by default for manufacturer catalogues), the depth depends on what you need, in our example it will consist of the width of the worktop and finally enter the height. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Click on the chosen article's previsualisation graphic zone with the left mouse button and keep it held down. The mouse cursor will transform into the silhouette of a hand. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Slide the mouse cursor towards the work area to where the article should be. Note that the silhouette of the article slides along with the mouse cursor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Release the left mouse button when the jamb is level with the body of the piece of furniture. Your jambs will automatically and correctly place themselves. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Jambage_EN.png]]  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing automatic linear articles|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Managing_the_components&amp;diff=898</id>
		<title>Managing the components</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Managing_the_components&amp;diff=898"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:26:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Managing the components&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some objects in the standard, generic or manufacturer catalogues have priced or non-priced options that can be added (present) or taken away (absent) in the scene. These options are called Components in InSitu. To add or take them away, first select an element (a Window or Low oven for example) then click on '''Object | Components''' or right click with the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Composant1_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will bring you to this window, where you can find the following information: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Active component for an article&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Component reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Component name&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Quantity of the component&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Component's price including tax&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Component description&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Allows you to modify the component's attributes (for example, the width, depth, height, placement height)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;8&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Allows you to modify the finish of a component, if available (colour of a decorative side) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;9&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Allows you to visualise the details of the component's price&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;10&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Displays a 3D view of the component if such a view exists&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Composant2_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] '''Remarks'''&lt;br /&gt;
Placing a window automatically leads to adding a blind as a component. &lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;quot;cutlery&amp;quot; decorative object will have components such as the fork, the glass, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Managing the handles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In some manufacturer catalogues, handles are treated as components, which means you can isolate them as distinct elements of the furniture and interact with them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a handle is considered a component, then you can: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Untick its box to make it disappear. Be careful, in this case, the handle will no longer be billed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Move it and change its orientation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Composant3_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing jambs|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_furniture&amp;diff=897</id>
		<title>Placing furniture</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_furniture&amp;diff=897"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:25:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing furniture&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the InSitu software version 9 update, the place window has evolved. To offer a more ergonomic and pleasant user experience, some catalogues are now web-based (meaning the catalogue's database is now on a web server) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a web-based display, 2 conditions must be met: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - you must be connected to the Internet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - the online catalogue must be web-based&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these two conditions aren't met, you will instead use the classic place window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more, click on the &amp;quot;Find out more&amp;quot; link in the place window that pops up in your InSitu software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre classique&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose1.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Non Web-Based Furniture(internet connection not required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre avec catalogue webisé&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose2.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Web-Based Furniture (internet connection required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Managing the components|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_walls&amp;diff=895</id>
		<title>Placing walls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_walls&amp;diff=895"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:25:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing walls&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=INHVzKRqejM&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Walls can be placed in 3 different ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- when creating a new scene, in the window about the dimensions of the walls,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- directly in the InSitu scene,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- with the help of shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's go through each case: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;When creating a new scene&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot; '''New Scene''' &amp;quot; dialog box, which we saw previously in creating a new scene.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can alter the angles between two walls by making cuts in &amp;quot;Rectangle, in &amp;quot;Bevel&amp;quot; or in &amp;quot;Rounded&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's go through the 3 possibilities together: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Rectangle cuts: by clicking on &amp;quot;no cuts&amp;quot; in the angle that you wish to change, the three cut possibilities appear. For rectangle cuts, 2 measurements are required: the cut before the angle and the cut after the angle. For example, let's enter 500 and 600... As you can see below, the system cuts the walls 500mm before the angle and 600 mm after the angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Bevel cuts: once again, you must enter the measurements before and after the cut. Let's take 550 and 650 for example. Below is the result. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Rounded cuts: again, you must enter the cut measurements. We'll put in 750 and 900 as an example. The system then rounds the angle based on the new information entered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posemur_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have now gone through the first method of placing walls. It is particularly useful for rooms with simple layouts and InSitu beginners. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create a scene with specific features (a 135° angle, rounded walls, ...), we would not recommend using this technique for placing the walls. Instead, put the overall measurements of the scene in the &amp;quot;Width&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Depth&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; boxes, and then click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; without ticking the walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An empty scene will appear, with a yellow frame corresponding to the previously given dimensions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;With the &amp;quot;Place Wall&amp;quot; tool&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Walls&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon (or F5 shortcut on your keyboard) allows you to create your own walls. When you click on it, your mouse cursor transforms and will be the starting point of your wall.&lt;br /&gt;
Click once to start drawing your wall and then move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to be (careful, make sure to work clockwise).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A small window will appear allowing you to enter the dimensions of the wall and the angle, if needed (accessible through the TAB button). Confirm with the ENTER key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mur2_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have no more walls to place, the Esc button allows you to stop creating walls. A final window will open, allowing you to enter the thickness and the height of the walls. Choose the &amp;quot;towards the outside&amp;quot; option so that your walls are placed towards the outside, therefore not disturbing the inner layout of the room. However, if you placed the walls anti-clockwise, then choose the &amp;quot;towards the inside&amp;quot; option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;By using shapes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of shapes, you can draw your room with specific forms and designs: for example, rounded walls, angles other than 90°, etc. Once you have finished drawing the shape, click on the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Walls&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon. The system will ask if you wish to place walls on your existing shapes. Click on &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; and you will transform your shapes into walls.  &lt;br /&gt;
Don't hesitate to check out our tutorials dedicated to shapes in order to see the many features of this function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Mur3_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; '''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Wall markings&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like articles, the walls will now be marked, both from top view and from any elevation perspective. These markings can be deleted (via the &amp;quot;scene&amp;quot; drop down menu, then &amp;quot;markings&amp;quot;), moved (with the help of the CTRL button on your keyboard) or altered (equally via markings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; '''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Changing the length and thickness of a wall with your mouse&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In top view, you can alter the length or thickness of a wall by stretching it using the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on a wall with the mouse displays blue circles (and anchorage points). WIth these, you can lengthen or thicken your wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you stretch a wall, a window will pop up. This allows you to enlarge or thicken the wall to specific dimensions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mur1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Understanding the Place window|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_angles&amp;diff=894</id>
		<title>Creating angles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_angles&amp;diff=894"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:25:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating angles&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a 90° or 135° angle===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mkB6THvQJTY&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an angle is the starting point for designing the lay out of your room. Compared to angle furniture which tends to be quite intuitive, it can be very difficult to place an angle filler. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some manufacturer catalogues contain what is called a graphic filler aid. A graphic filler aid is a sort of silhouette that can be wedged into an angle the same way that you place angle furniture. This makes it a lot easier to place the angle filler. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For manufacturer catalogues without a graphic failler aid, here is a method for easily and precisely placing your angle fillers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Firstly, let's place what we call the zones for each side of the angle. These zones are silhouettes that will help you easily visualise the space that you want to design and therefore, where to place the filler.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Place | Zone. The zone can be placed in 3 clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
A first click on the extremity of the first wall, a second click on the other extremity of the wall and a third click will allow you to place the zone. When you right click on this zone, you can choose the length and most importantly the depth of the zone in attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine that the standard depth of the manufacturer catalogue you are using is 580 mm and that you want to place a façade aligned angle filler. Therefore, you want your zone to have a depth of 580 mm. By clicking on &amp;quot;by default&amp;quot;, then all the zones you place in the future will use that depth by default. Of course, if you need to change the depth, then you can easily do so in the attributes of the zone. Now, click on OK.  &lt;br /&gt;
Our first zone has now been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
Next, using the same method, place the second zone but on the other wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, you have an accurate view of the zone that you are designing and, more importantly, perfect visibility of the spot that you want to place your angle filler. Pick the angle filler in the catalogue and do a drag and drop. Don't hesitate to use the move tool for a more precise positioning of the filler.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this method, the automatic linears are placed without any difficulty. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up an angle other than 90° or 135°===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VaGHU6-y3f8&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=4&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If placing a 90° or 135° angle filler is child's play thanks to the use of graphic aids from the manufacturer catalogues, placing fillers of different angles is considerably harder. &lt;br /&gt;
Let's see how to fix this problem. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all, if you struggle to place 90° or 135° angle fillers, then please refer to the tutorial dedicated to them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up angles other than 90° or 135°, the main difficulty is placing the fillers. Indeed, if they are badly placed, then the whole scene is likely to be flawed and the automatic linears won't work. &lt;br /&gt;
To overcome this difficulty, stick to the following method: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''127° angle example'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, select a simple angle filler. It can be either outward facing or furniture facing, it doesn't matter. Enter the desired width. Then, keep the CTRL button pressed down on your keyboard and only release it once the filler has been correctly placed. Drag and drop teh filler. The filler must be positioned in the angle so that the back of the filler is facing one of the two walls. Always release the mouse first before releasing the CTRL key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:amenageranglediff_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the same with the second filler but this time around, position it so that the back of the filler is facing the other wall... Remember to release the CTRL button last. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your fillers are now well positioned. All you need to do is place the furniture and launch the automatic linears. When using this method, everything will be automatically, and more importantly correctly, positioned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing furniture|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_angles&amp;diff=893</id>
		<title>Creating angles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_angles&amp;diff=893"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:25:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating angles&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up a 90° or 135° angle===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mkB6THvQJTY&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting up an angle is the starting point for designing the lay out of your room. Compared to angle furniture which tends to be quite intuitive, it can be very difficult to place an angle filler. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some manufacturer catalogues contain what is called a graphic filler aid. A graphic filler aid is a sort of silhouette that can be wedged into an angle the same way that you place angle furniture. This makes it a lot easier to place the angle filler. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For manufacturer catalogues without a graphic failler aid, here is a method for easily and precisely placing your angle fillers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Firstly, let's place what we call the zones for each side of the angle. These zones are silhouettes that will help you easily visualise the space that you want to design and therefore, where to place the filler.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose Place | Zone. The zone can be placed in 3 clicks. &lt;br /&gt;
A first click on the extremity of the first wall, a second click on the other extremity of the wall and a third click will allow you to place the zone. When you right click on this zone, you can choose the length and most importantly the depth of the zone in attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's imagine that the standard depth of the manufacturer catalogue you are using is 580 mm and that you want to place a façade aligned angle filler. Therefore, you want your zone to have a depth of 580 mm. By clicking on &amp;quot;by default&amp;quot;, then all the zones you place in the future will use that depth by default. Of course, if you need to change the depth, then you can easily do so in the attributes of the zone. Now, click on OK.  &lt;br /&gt;
Our first zone has now been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
Next, using the same method, place the second zone but on the other wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, you have an accurate view of the zone that you are designing and, more importantly, perfect visibility of the spot that you want to place your angle filler. Pick the angle filler in the catalogue and do a drag and drop. Don't hesitate to use the move tool for a more precise positioning of the filler.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With this method, the automatic linears are placed without any difficulty. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setting up an angle other than 90° or 135°===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VaGHU6-y3f8&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=4&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If placing a 90° or 135° angle filler is child's play thanks to the use of graphic aids from the manufacturer catalogues, placing fillers of different angles is considerably harder. &lt;br /&gt;
Let's see how to fix this problem. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First of all, if you struggle to place 90° or 135° angle fillers, then please refer to the tutorial dedicated to them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When setting up angles other than 90° or 135°, the main difficulty is placing the fillers. Indeed, if they are badly placed, then the whole scene is likely to be flawed and the automatic linears won't work. &lt;br /&gt;
To overcome this difficulty, stick to the following method: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''127° angle example'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, select a simple angle filler. It can be either outward facing or furniture facing, it doesn't matter. Enter the desired width. Then, keep the CTRL button pressed down on your keyboard and only release it once the filler has been correctly placed. Drag and drop teh filler. The filler must be positioned in the angle so that the back of the filler is facing one of the two walls. Always release the mouse first before releasing the CTRL key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:amenageranglediff_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the same with the second filler but this time around, position it so that the back of the filler is facing the other wall... Remember to release the CTRL button last. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your fillers are now well positioned. All you need to do is place the furniture and launch the automatic linears. When using this method, everything will be automatically, and more importantly correctly, positioned. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing furniture|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_constraints&amp;diff=892</id>
		<title>Positioning constraints</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Positioning_constraints&amp;diff=892"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:24:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Positioning constraints&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
With the InSitu software version 9 update, the place window has evolved. To offer a more ergonomic and pleasant user experience, some catalogues are now web-based (meaning the catalogue's database is now on a web server) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a web-based display, 2 conditions must be met: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - you must be connected to the Internet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - the online catalogue must be web-based&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these two conditions aren't met, you will instead use the classic place window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more, click on the &amp;quot;Find out more&amp;quot; link in the place window that pops up in your InSitu software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre classique&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.contrainte1.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Non Web-Based Constraints(internet connection not required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre avec catalogue webisé&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.contrainte2.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Web-Based Constraints (internet connection required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Creating angles|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Understanding_the_Place_window&amp;diff=891</id>
		<title>Understanding the Place window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Understanding_the_Place_window&amp;diff=891"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:24:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Understanding the Place window&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JW_-hf1LU4o&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the InSitu version 9 software update, the place window has evolved. For a more agreeable and ergonomic usage, some catalogues are now web-based (the catalogue's databse is now on a web server). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To have a web-based display, 2 conditions must be met:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - you must be connected to the Internet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - the online catalogue must be web-based&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these two conditions aren't met, then you will have the classic place window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more, click on the &amp;quot;Find out more&amp;quot; link in the place window in your InSitu software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre classique&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose1.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Non Web-Based Window (internet connection not required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre avec catalogue webisé&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose2.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Web-Based Window (internet connection required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Positioning constraints|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Understanding_the_Place_window&amp;diff=890</id>
		<title>Understanding the Place window</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Understanding_the_Place_window&amp;diff=890"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:24:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Understanding the Place window&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JW_-hf1LU4o&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the InSitu version 9 software update, the place window has evolved. For a more agreeable and ergonomic usage, some catalogues are now web-based (the catalogue's databse is now on a web server). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To have a web-based display, 2 conditions must be met:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - you must be connected to the Internet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - the online catalogue must be web-based&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If these two conditions aren't met, then you will have the classic place window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more, click on the &amp;quot;Find out more&amp;quot; link in the place window in your InSitu software. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot; class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre classique&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose1.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Non Web-Based Window (internet connection not required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col txt-center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Fenêtre avec catalogue webisé&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:Fig.9.0.concevoir.pose2.jpg|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Web-Based Window (internet connection required)|Learn more]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Positioning constraints|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_walls&amp;diff=889</id>
		<title>Placing walls</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_walls&amp;diff=889"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:24:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing walls&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=INHVzKRqejM&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Walls can be placed in 3 different ways&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- when creating a new scene, in the window about the dimensions of the walls,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- directly in the InSitu scene,&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- with the help of shapes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's go through each case: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;When creating a new scene&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot; '''New Scene''' &amp;quot; dialog box, which we saw previously in creating a new scene.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can alter the angles between two walls by making cuts in &amp;quot;Rectangle, in &amp;quot;Bevel&amp;quot; or in &amp;quot;Rounded&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let's go through the 3 possibilities together: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Rectangle cuts: by clicking on &amp;quot;no cuts&amp;quot; in the angle that you wish to change, the three cut possibilities appear. For rectangle cuts, 2 measurements are required: the cut before the angle and the cut after the angle. For example, let's enter 500 and 600... As you can see below, the system cuts the walls 500mm before the angle and 600 mm after the angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Bevel cuts: once again, you must enter the measurements before and after the cut. Let's take 550 and 650 for example. Below is the result. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Rounded cuts: again, you must enter the cut measurements. We'll put in 750 and 900 as an example. The system then rounds the angle based on the new information entered. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posemur_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
We have now gone through the first method of placing walls. It is particularly useful for rooms with simple layouts and InSitu beginners. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to create a scene with specific features (a 135° angle, rounded walls, ...), we would not recommend using this technique for placing the walls. Instead, put the overall measurements of the scene in the &amp;quot;Width&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Depth&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; boxes, and then click on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; without ticking the walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An empty scene will appear, with a yellow frame corresponding to the previously given dimensions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;With the &amp;quot;Place Wall&amp;quot; tool&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Walls&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon (or F5 shortcut on your keyboard) allows you to create your own walls. When you click on it, your mouse cursor transforms and will be the starting point of your wall.&lt;br /&gt;
Click once to start drawing your wall and then move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to be (careful, make sure to work clockwise).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A small window will appear allowing you to enter the dimensions of the wall and the angle, if needed (accessible through the TAB button). Confirm with the ENTER key. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mur2_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you have no more walls to place, the Esc button allows you to stop creating walls. A final window will open, allowing you to enter the thickness and the height of the walls. Choose the &amp;quot;towards the outside&amp;quot; option so that your walls are placed towards the outside, therefore not disturbing the inner layout of the room. However, if you placed the walls anti-clockwise, then choose the &amp;quot;towards the inside&amp;quot; option. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;By using shapes&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
With the help of shapes, you can draw your room with specific forms and designs: for example, rounded walls, angles other than 90°, etc. Once you have finished drawing the shape, click on the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Walls&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; icon. The system will ask if you wish to place walls on your existing shapes. Click on &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; and you will transform your shapes into walls.  &lt;br /&gt;
Don't hesitate to check out our tutorials dedicated to shapes in order to see the many features of this function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg gif&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Mur3_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; '''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Wall markings&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like articles, the walls will now be marked, both from top view and from any elevation perspective. These markings can be deleted (via the &amp;quot;scene&amp;quot; drop down menu, then &amp;quot;markings&amp;quot;), moved (with the help of the CTRL button on your keyboard) or altered (equally via markings&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; '''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Changing the length and thickness of a wall with your mouse&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In top view, you can alter the length or thickness of a wall by stretching it using the mouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Clicking on a wall with the mouse displays blue circles (and anchorage points). WIth these, you can lengthen or thicken your wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you stretch a wall, a window will pop up. This allows you to enlarge or thicken the wall to specific dimensions. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:mur1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Understanding the Place window|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_new_project&amp;diff=888</id>
		<title>Creating a new project</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Creating_a_new_project&amp;diff=888"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:23:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Creating a new project&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZqBG_mJpJy8&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A new scene is created through different successive steps corresponding to the order of the different tutorials making up the &amp;quot;Design&amp;quot; path. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- '''Entering client information'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the '''File''' drop down menu, choose '''New scene'''. A new window entitled '''Business information''' will appear on your screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In here, you can find the current state of the folder (pending, agreement, refusal) with all the information concerning the delivery and installation date. Thanks to the schedule button, you can set up a schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; About client information. Only the boxes &amp;quot;Name&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Company&amp;quot; are mandatory in order to start. The rest of the information is optional and can be filled in at a later time by going to '''Scene | Information'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Here, you will find all the pricing information and you can choose the VAT rate applied to the project (Normal, reduced, or other) as well as the currency. &lt;br /&gt;
At any time, you can change all this information by going to the '''Scene''' drop down menu and choosing '''Information'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:InfoComm_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, enter Thompson into the &amp;quot;'''Name'''&amp;quot; box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot;'''OK'''&amp;quot; button or press '''ENTER''' on your keyboard. A new window, named '''Generic finishes (Fig.11b)''' then appears onscreen. It lets you choose the model and the finishes of the furniture that will be placed afterward. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2- '''Choosing your generic finishes'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:choixfinition_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Choose the manufacturer catalogue that you want to design your project with&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Via the drop down menu, choose one of the available models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png]]Careful, if the models exist as models without handles, then they have been duplicated. You will find the list of models without handles below the models with handles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; Fill in the finishes and the options&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;4&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; For each finish or option chosen in &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;, then new choices will be offered. The system only offers choices that exist in the catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;5&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; It is possible to directly enter the catalogue reference so as to find your colours and choice of options. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;6&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; As you go along and confirm your choices, visuals will allow you to check if you're happy with them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;7&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; In some ways, harmonies are your favourites. You can save your generic finishes so that you can reuse them for other projects. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3- '''The dimensions of the scene, placing walls'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot;'''OK'''&amp;quot; button or press '''ENTER''' on your keyboard. A new dialog box will pop up on your screen, named '''New scene'''. It allows you to: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; specify the base dimensions of your implantation (overall interior of the room) and the height of the walls&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; choose, if needed, a type of ground&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;chiffre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; if the wall set up is simple (linear implantation, parralel, &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;U&amp;quot;) tick some of the four boxes located around the white triangle in area of the group &amp;quot;Walls&amp;quot; so that they represent your wall set up&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Nouvscène_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If the way your walls are set up is more complicated and can't be specified by ticking the boxes described above, don't tick any box; the walls will then need to be drawn with the help of a '''shape'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the &amp;quot; '''OK''' &amp;quot; button, or press on '''ENTER''' on your keyboard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing tiling on the floor|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Top_view&amp;diff=887</id>
		<title>Top view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Top_view&amp;diff=887"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:22:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Top view&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The top view allows you to see the plan of the scene.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Vuedessus.JPG|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Top view is one of the views that you will use the most. Building walls, placing constraints, positionning your furniture and decorations, adding your floors and ceilings, you will mostly perform these tasks in top view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each element placed in the scene will have a number on them. This number refers to the order that the elements were placed. They are also called marks. You have the option of changing some attributes by going to '''Scene | Mark...'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Marquage_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:1orange.png|left|link=]] The type: no mark, the order numbers (by default), the catalogue references, the user references (can be changed in the attributes of the object). &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:2orange.png|left|link=]] The style: the size of the characters, the colour and the background colour.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:3orange.png|left|link=]] The orientation: allows the text to always be horizontal, always vertical or to follow the orientation of the object (by default). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Drawing mode'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After selecting an object, you have the option of modifying its '''Drawing mode'''. To do so: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select an object&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Click on the '''Selection''' drop down menu and then on '''Drawing mode'''. A dialog box will appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Modedessin_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Change, as needed, the various information contained in the dialog box: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the filling-in style &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the style or thickness of the lines&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the colour&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- the attenuation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Visualiser}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Elevation views|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=886</id>
		<title>Updating an old project with a recent rate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=886"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:22:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Updating an old project with a recent rate&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the version of a catalogue for an already existing scene: for example, going from a version N to a version N+1. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select the new catalogue by clicking on '''Scene | Change catalogue'''. The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChangeCat1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - You can now select the new catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the change of catalogue has been implemented , a colour code will point out any eventual inconsistencies with the pricing. The colour code works in the following way:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:remplacercatalogue.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that don't create any issues will appear in green. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that no longer have a reference in the new catalogue will appear in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles that cannot be replaced using the new catalogue because of a non-existent finish code or now unavailable dimensions will appear in orange in the pricing table. To replace an &amp;quot;orange&amp;quot; article, all you need to do is press on the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; button, and then on &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Top view|Next route]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=885</id>
		<title>Updating an old project with a recent rate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=885"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:21:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Updating an old project with a recent rate&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the version of a catalogue for an already existing scene: for example, going from a version N to a version N+1. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select the new catalogue by clicking on '''Scene | Change catalogue'''. The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChangeCat1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - You can now select the new catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the change of catalogue has been implemented , a colour code will point out any eventual inconsistencies with the pricing. The colour code works in the following way:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:remplacercatalogue.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that don't create any issues will appear in green. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that no longer have a reference in the new catalogue will appear in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles that cannot be replaced using the new catalogue because of a non-existent finish code or now unavailable dimensions will appear in orange in the pricing table. To replace an &amp;quot;orange&amp;quot; article, all you need to do is press on the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; button, and then on &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Top view|Aller au parcours suivant]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=883</id>
		<title>Updating an old project with a recent rate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=883"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:20:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Updating an old project with a recent rate&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the version of a catalogue for an already existing scene: for example, going from a version N to a version N+1. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select the new catalogue by clicking on '''Scene | Change catalogue'''. The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChangeCat1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - You can now select the new catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the change of catalogue has been implemented , a colour code will point out any eventual inconsistencies with the pricing. The colour code works in the following way:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:remplacercatalogue.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that don't create any issues will appear in green. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that no longer have a reference in the new catalogue will appear in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles that cannot be replaced using the new catalogue because of a non-existent finish code or now unavailable dimensions will appear in orange in the pricing table. To replace an &amp;quot;orange&amp;quot; article, all you need to do is press on the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; button, and then on &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Top view|Aller au parcours suivant]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=882</id>
		<title>Updating an old project with a recent rate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=882"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:19:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Updating an old project with a recent rate&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the version of a catalogue for an already existing scene: for example, going from a version N to a version N+1. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select the new catalogue by clicking on '''Scene | Change catalogue'''. The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChangeCat1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - You can now select the new catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the change of catalogue has been implemented , a colour code will point out any eventual inconsistencies with the pricing. The colour code works in the following way:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:remplacercatalogue.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that don't create any issues will appear in green. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that no longer have a reference in the new catalogue will appear in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles that cannot be replaced using the new catalogue because of a non-existent finish code or now unavailable dimensions will appear in orange in the pricing table. To replace an &amp;quot;orange&amp;quot; article, all you need to do is press on the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; button, and then on &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser de la décoration|Aller au parcours suivant]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=881</id>
		<title>Updating an old project with a recent rate</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Updating_an_old_project_with_a_recent_rate&amp;diff=881"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:19:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Saving and printing the project&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This feature allows you to change the version of a catalogue for an already existing scene: for example, going from a version N to a version N+1. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Select the new catalogue by clicking on '''Scene | Change catalogue'''. The following window will appear: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ChangeCat1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - You can now select the new catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the change of catalogue has been implemented , a colour code will point out any eventual inconsistencies with the pricing. The colour code works in the following way:  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:remplacercatalogue.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that don't create any issues will appear in green. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The replaced articles that no longer have a reference in the new catalogue will appear in red. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The articles that cannot be replaced using the new catalogue because of a non-existent finish code or now unavailable dimensions will appear in orange in the pricing table. To replace an &amp;quot;orange&amp;quot; article, all you need to do is press on the &amp;quot;Find&amp;quot; button, and then on &amp;quot;Replace&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser de la décoration|Aller au parcours suivant]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=880</id>
		<title>Saving and printing the project</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=880"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:18:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Saving and printing the project&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to save your design, by clicking on the '''File''' drop down menu: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. '''File | Save''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. '''File | Save as''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you can change in the '''Business Information''' window that pops up.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. '''File | Save version''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window by increasing the version. You can save several different versions of the same project.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SauvegardeProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu prints the current view as it is displayed on the screen.The dimensions of the scene entered at the beginning (green frame) are important for the printing as well as the 3D display. &lt;br /&gt;
Before printing, make sure that the printer is suitably set up and well adapted to the view (size and orientation of the paper, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to make sure that the view fits well in the frame, click on '''Zoom | Adjusted'''. To start printing, click on '''File | Print'''.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print a top or elevation view, a dialog box entitled '''Printing format''' will appear, asking you to choose the scale which you want the view printed in.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default scale is the most appropriate considering the dimensions of the area you want to print as well as the format and orientation of the paper. If you want to, you can choose a different scale, or choose '''adjusted''' if you would like InSitu to make the scene best fit the paper, without worrying about a standardised scale. Then, press on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or click on the ENTER key to keep printing, or choose &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to cancel it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're printing a virtual reality or photorealistic perspective view, the '''Image resolution''' dialog box will appear, asking you to choose the resolution, which is to say at which fineness the view will be printed in (number of dots in width and in height compared to your screen resolution). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet2_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;x1&amp;quot; screen resolution is useful as the printing will start very quickly, the image calculation having already been done on screen. However, if you want your printings to have a higher resolution than what is displayed on screen, choose &amp;quot;x 1,5&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;x 2&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;x3&amp;quot;. These choices will lead to a new image calculation and this calculation will take slightly more time than the screen image. Indeed, the &amp;quot;x 3&amp;quot; choice will, for example, result in an image with 9 times more pixels than what is displayed on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in realist perspective, you have the option of choosing an output resolution towards the printer, with vector mode being very slow with processing languages like PCL5 or PCL6. &lt;br /&gt;
Some printers can be very slow to print scenes in perspective view. To solve this issue, it is recommended to select the vector printing mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you want the software to remember your printing choices, all you need to do is click the by default button and your choices will be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Updating an old project with a recent rate|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=879</id>
		<title>Saving and printing the project</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Saving_and_printing_the_project&amp;diff=879"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:18:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing text, arrows, symbols&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
There are a few different ways to save your design, by clicking on the '''File''' drop down menu: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. '''File | Save''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. '''File | Save as''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you can change in the '''Business Information''' window that pops up.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. '''File | Save version''' : Saves the scene under the title of '''Company''' and '''Business''' or '''Surname''' and '''Name''' that you entered when creating the scene in the '''Business Information''' window by increasing the version. You can save several different versions of the same project.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SauvegardeProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
InSitu prints the current view as it is displayed on the screen.The dimensions of the scene entered at the beginning (green frame) are important for the printing as well as the 3D display. &lt;br /&gt;
Before printing, make sure that the printer is suitably set up and well adapted to the view (size and orientation of the paper, etc.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to make sure that the view fits well in the frame, click on '''Zoom | Adjusted'''. To start printing, click on '''File | Print'''.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to print a top or elevation view, a dialog box entitled '''Printing format''' will appear, asking you to choose the scale which you want the view printed in.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet1_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default scale is the most appropriate considering the dimensions of the area you want to print as well as the format and orientation of the paper. If you want to, you can choose a different scale, or choose '''adjusted''' if you would like InSitu to make the scene best fit the paper, without worrying about a standardised scale. Then, press on &amp;quot;OK&amp;quot; or click on the ENTER key to keep printing, or choose &amp;quot;Cancel&amp;quot; to cancel it. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you're printing a virtual reality or photorealistic perspective view, the '''Image resolution''' dialog box will appear, asking you to choose the resolution, which is to say at which fineness the view will be printed in (number of dots in width and in height compared to your screen resolution). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:ImpressionProjet2_EN.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;x1&amp;quot; screen resolution is useful as the printing will start very quickly, the image calculation having already been done on screen. However, if you want your printings to have a higher resolution than what is displayed on screen, choose &amp;quot;x 1,5&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;x 2&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;x3&amp;quot;. These choices will lead to a new image calculation and this calculation will take slightly more time than the screen image. Indeed, the &amp;quot;x 3&amp;quot; choice will, for example, result in an image with 9 times more pixels than what is displayed on screen. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When in realist perspective, you have the option of choosing an output resolution towards the printer, with vector mode being very slow with processing languages like PCL5 or PCL6. &lt;br /&gt;
Some printers can be very slow to print scenes in perspective view. To solve this issue, it is recommended to select the vector printing mode. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:LogoInfo.png|link=]] If you want the software to remember your printing choices, all you need to do is click the by default button and your choices will be saved. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Updating an old project with a recent rate|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=878</id>
		<title>Placing text, arrows, symbols</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=878"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T13:17:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing text, arrows, symbols&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PoseTexteFlèche1_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing text===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to display information about your scene, you have the option of placing text in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Place | Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will appear, where you can fill in your text and change the font or colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text will appear in the centre of your scene. You can then move it like any other object on InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing an arrow===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow can help you highlight a space so that you can put text outside of the shape itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow is done via '''Place | Arrow'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first mouse click indicates the beginning of the arrow and the second indicates the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing an elevation symbol===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXSbkuvFhaI&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqHmSy1Cn3UXngfTpALskqih&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elevation symbol is used to see and work on 2D elements from the front. There are three ways to see an element from the front : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Selecting an object (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Realistic or wireframe perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Selecting a wall (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Wireframe or realistic elevation'''. By double clicking on walls, you will immediately be put into the realistic perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Placing an elevation symbol, which will allow you to elevate an object or a group of objects, and then via '''View | Wireframe or realistic view'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to place this elevation symbol, you must click on the '''Place''' button and then '''Elevation symbol''' in the ensuing drop down menu. It takes three clicks to place it: the two first to define the elevation area and the third one to determine the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SymboleEval1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you place an object in this view, it will be placed between the first two clicks in the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Saving and printing the project|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_electric_appliances_and_sanitary_facilitiess&amp;diff=875</id>
		<title>Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_electric_appliances_and_sanitary_facilitiess&amp;diff=875"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T10:11:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4bUAn8E07yU&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing electric appliances===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use a few different catalogues to place electric appliances&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;@Electric Appliances : catalogue with 3D version of electric appliances but without prices and without a link to a brand&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand: manufacturer catalogue with prices but without 3D&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand3D: manufacturer catalogue with both prices and 3D&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Oven===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you place a column oven, the oven will be represented by the visuals of a standard oven without any pricing. You then have two options: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- to add the pricing of the oven to your project and keep the default visuals&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this case, search for the desired reference in the manufacturer catalogue of your choice, and place your article in pricing view. If you go through a wholesaler, then it's also possible to place a free article.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- to replace the default visuals with the manufacturer visuals, including the pricing. In this case, you must have the manufacturer's 3D catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
In elevation view, select the default oven, then search for the oven you want to replace it with, in the manufacturer catalogue. Thanks to this icon [[Image:Remplacer.png|link=]], perform the exchange. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro1_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Hob and extractor hood===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In top view, search for a hob in the standard catalogue or the manufacturer catalogue of your choice. &lt;br /&gt;
Drag and drop the reference above your cooking furniture. Don't worry about the placement height, the hob will be automatically placed on the worktop. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do the same for your extractor hood. &lt;br /&gt;
Check the placement height: for the extractor hood, it must be &amp;quot;under&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro2_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once placed, you can centre your hob and extractor hood in relation to your low piece of cooking furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
To make the selection of articles easier, we will use the CTRL + right CLICK feature for this manoeuvre. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, select one or several articles that you want to centre. Do a CTRL + right click above your cooking furniture. The list of articles will appear. Select your hob. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repeat the operation if there are other elements to align (remember to keep the SHIFT key pressed down to select a second element). Here, we shall select the extractor hood. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lastly, select the article which will serve as a reference, i.e. the low piece of cooking furniture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the selection menu | choose &amp;quot;horizontally align&amp;quot; and then click on &amp;quot;centre&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Electro3_EN.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Fridge and dishwasher===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of a integrated fridge and dishwasher, hidden by a door, they will always only be priced. All you need to do is click place to include them in your pricing. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the case of a free placing fridge and dishwasher, they will be both drawn and priced as they won't be hidden by a door. You can choose them in the catalogue of your choice and place them. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing sanitary facilities===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Just like for the electric appliances, there are several different catalogues to choose from for placing sanitary appliances. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;@Sinks &amp;amp; taps: catalogue with 3D version of sinks and tap, but not priced and not linked to a brand&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;li&amp;gt;ManufacturerBrand: manufacturer catalogue with priced references, and with or without graphic representations&amp;lt;/li&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/ul&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;The standard sink and tap catalogue allows you to personalise your bowl and tap. To find out how to create and personalise your bowl and tap, we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Sink and faucet configurator (Applicat)|Decorating Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;width:50%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing the floor and ceiling|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=874</id>
		<title>Placing the floor and ceiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=874"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T10:10:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing the floor and ceiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a floor or a ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place a floor (or a ceiling) as soon as you start designing the layout of your room in the &amp;quot;New scene&amp;quot; dialog box, as long as you placed the walls in the same dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, when creating more complex scenes, there is a different method for placing floors and ceilings. You can place them at any time, as long as the walls have been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- Select one wall by clicking on it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2- Perform a right click on your mouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3- Use the &amp;quot;shape&amp;quot; feature in the window that pops up. The whole shape of the construction will be displayed along the walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4- In the place window, choose the &amp;quot;@CONSTRAINTS&amp;quot; window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5- Choose the &amp;quot;Floors&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Ceilings&amp;quot; chapter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6- Choose the block you would like, then click &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's important to note that you can place the floor and ceiling in whatever order you like, but you need to make the shape appear once for the floor and once for the ceiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Knowing the floor's surface area===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's always useful to know the floor's total surface area in m². To measure it, select your floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surface area is displayed in the bottom left of the InSitu window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:surfacesol_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to personalise your floor (parquet, tiles), we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a sloping ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The @CONSTRAINTS catalogue contains the article (Sloping ceiling av.fen Applicat), which allows you to set up a sloping ceiling with or without a roof window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to create and personalise your sloping ceiling, we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Sloped wall configurator (Applicat)|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;width:50%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Modify finishes|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Sloped_wall_configurator_(Applicat)&amp;diff=873</id>
		<title>Sloped wall configurator (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Sloped_wall_configurator_(Applicat)&amp;diff=873"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:34:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: Created page with &amp;quot;In progress&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In progress&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Sink_and_faucet_configurator_(Applicat)&amp;diff=872</id>
		<title>Sink and faucet configurator (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Sink_and_faucet_configurator_(Applicat)&amp;diff=872"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:34:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: Created page with &amp;quot;IN PROGRESS&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;IN PROGRESS&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=871</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=871"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:33:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sloped wall configurator&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Sloped wall configurator (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sink and faucet configurator&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Sink and faucet configurator (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=870</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=870"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:26:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Sloped wall configurator&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Sloped wall configurator (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=869</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=869"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:24:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Sloped wall configuration (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=868</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=868"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:22:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=867</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=867"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:03:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=866</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=866"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:02:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[File:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=865</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=865"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:01:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=864</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=864"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:01:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Assistant Création Objet3D (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=863</id>
		<title>3D Object Creation Wizard (Applicat)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=3D_Object_Creation_Wizard_(Applicat)&amp;diff=863"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T09:00:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Assistant Création Objet3D (Applicat)&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_evenly wrap&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Porte et fenêtre&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatPorteFenêtre_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Portes et Fenêtre (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Verrière&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatVerrière_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Verrière (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Sous-Pente&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Sous-Pente (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20 mb-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Luminaire&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatLuminaire_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Luminaire (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Evier et Robinet&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatEvier_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex col y_center txt-center mt-20&amp;quot; style=&amp;quot;width:48%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;strong&amp;gt;Configurateur Cadre et tableaux&amp;lt;/strong&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Fichier:ApplicatTableaux_FR.png|link=]]&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;mt-20&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Cadre et tableaux (Applicat)]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Retour haut de page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Poser du carrelage au sol|Etape suivante]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:Menu_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=862</id>
		<title>Placing the floor and ceiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_the_floor_and_ceiling&amp;diff=862"/>
		<updated>2024-08-07T08:56:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing the floor and ceiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mbBIjAQ-0PA&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFa5_zPfdNVclL0x8F69hgP&amp;amp;index=9&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a floor or a ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can place a floor (or a ceiling) as soon as you start designing the layout of your room in the &amp;quot;New scene&amp;quot; dialog box, as long as you placed the walls in the same dialog box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However, when creating more complex scenes, there is a different method for placing floors and ceilings. You can place them at any time, as long as the walls have been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1- Select one wall by clicking on it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2- Perform a right click on your mouse&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3- Use the &amp;quot;shape&amp;quot; feature in the window that pops up. The whole shape of the construction will be displayed along the walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4- In the place window, choose the &amp;quot;@CONSTRAINTS&amp;quot; window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5- Choose the &amp;quot;Floors&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Ceilings&amp;quot; chapter&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6- Choose the block you would like, then click &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's important to note that you can place the floor and ceiling in whatever order you like, but you need to make the shape appear once for the floor and once for the ceiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Knowing the floor's surface area===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It's always useful to know the floor's total surface area in m². To measure it, select your floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The surface area is displayed in the bottom left of the InSitu window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:surfacesol_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to personalise your floor (parquet, tiles), we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Creating a palette of textures|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing a sloping ceiling===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The @CONSTRAINTS catalogue contains the article (Sloping ceiling av.fen Applicat), which allows you to set up a sloping ceiling with or without a roof window. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;encadre&amp;quot;&amp;gt;To find out how to create and personalise your sloping ceiling, we recommend checking out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Configurateur Evier et Robinet (Applicat)|Decorate Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt; of the wiki.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;flex x_center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;width:50%;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Image:ApplicatSousPente_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Modify finishes|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=859</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=859"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T15:55:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing wall tiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importing 3D Warehouse objects|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=858</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=858"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T15:48:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing wall tiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importing 3D Warehouse objects|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=857</id>
		<title>Placing wall tiling</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_wall_tiling&amp;diff=857"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T15:46:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; align=&amp;quot;left&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing wall tiling&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GsxPL3oU5qo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tiling can be placed in two different ways: either with the help of shapes or automatically (in credenza)&lt;br /&gt;
You have the choice between a priced and non-priced version of the &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling with shapes (shape feature)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to trace the edges of the entirely of the tiles, wall by wall or to the floor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23a.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of the two &amp;quot;@TILING&amp;quot; catalogues, priced or non-priced, and then click on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. Here, we chose &amp;quot;Joined earthernware - very light brown&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23b.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing tiling in credenza (Scene drop down menu feature | Automatic tiling)&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nitymzlAqec&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=7&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Having created your scene on InSitu, you will need to take a reading of the following sides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Side A, above the work plan&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Side B, the top of the work plan beneath the high furniture (credenzas)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23c.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then, you need to determine between which two points of the shape you wish to place your tiles. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Place the shape in top view, in a clockwork manner (you can go in front of a window or a door). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23d.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, make the dialog box appear by clicking on Scene | Automatic tiling&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) Click on &amp;quot;Add above&amp;quot; then select a tiling (Earthenware) in the @TILING catalogue&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Drag and drop the tiles (you can change their dimensions) from the place window to the yellow box (like for a piece of furniture)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) Fill in the &amp;quot;Low&amp;quot; box, which corresponds to the height of the floor above the work surface (here: 940). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
d) Fill in the &amp;quot;Height&amp;quot; box which corresponds to the height of the credenza (here 510). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e) Finish by clicking on &amp;quot;Place&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage6_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is the final result in the 3D photorealistic perspective :&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Fig.23f.jpg|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here are some points to remember:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) You can place different levels of tiles&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) Le gabarit doit être retiré après la pose du carrelage The shape must be withdrawn after the tiling has been placed&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
c) You can change different tiles: listel, decorative, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Here is an example of several levels of tiling with the &amp;quot;automatic tiling&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
Keep in mind that the final height must be entered in the last row of the tiling. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg img-full&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Posecarrelage8_ENG.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;21%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Décorer}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Importing 3D Warehouse objects|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=856</id>
		<title>Placing credenzas</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_credenzas&amp;diff=856"/>
		<updated>2024-08-06T15:38:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing credenzas&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;	&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yho-PH9Dwrg&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqFNRac8DBS4xYfBdCpr-tN9&amp;amp;index=2&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Credenzas===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The best way to place a credenza is to put yourself in elevation view. Once in elevation view, it is easy to get the measurements you need with the help of the measure tool. If you have any doubts about how to use this key tool, &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Key tools (measure, move…)#MEASURE TOOL|go to the Measure page]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this example, we need a credenza that is 2350 mm long and 1284 mm high. Let's choose the credenza in the @Generic Kitchen catalogue. &lt;br /&gt;
For manufacturer catalogues, don't hesitate to search for the reference of the desired credenza. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible methods: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The drag and drop method:  Enter the dimensions you calculated, then drag the credenza above, in elevation, and release. Your credenza has now been placed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:crédence1_EN.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Creating a shape: This method is used for creating credenzas that need to be cut out (example cut out around the outline of a window)&lt;br /&gt;
To find out more about shapes, check out the &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[What is a shape?|Shapes Course]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;. If your credenza is tiled, then check out this page: &amp;lt;b&amp;gt;[[Placing wall tiling|Placing wall tiles]]&amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Placing electric appliances and sanitary facilitiess|Next Step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=826</id>
		<title>Placing text, arrows, symbols</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=826"/>
		<updated>2024-08-05T15:53:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing text, arrows, symbols&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PoseTexteFlèche1_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing text===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to display information about your scene, you have the option of placing text in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Place | Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will appear, where you can fill in your text and change the font or colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text will appear in the centre of your scene. You can then move it like any other object on InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing an arrow===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow can help you highlight a space so that you can put text outside of the shape itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow is done via '''Place | Arrow'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first mouse click indicates the beginning of the arrow and the second indicates the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Placing an elevation symbol===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXSbkuvFhaI&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqHmSy1Cn3UXngfTpALskqih&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elevation symbol is used to see and work on 2D elements from the front. There are three ways to see an element from the front : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Selecting an object (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Realistic or wireframe perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Selecting a wall (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Wireframe or realistic elevation'''. By double clicking on walls, you will immediately be put into the realistic perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Placing an elevation symbol, which will allow you to elevate an object or a group of objects, and then via '''View | Wireframe or realistic view'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to place this elevation symbol, you must click on the '''Place''' button and then '''Elevation symbol''' in the ensuing drop down menu. It takes three clicks to place it: the two first to define the elevation area and the third one to determine the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SymboleEval1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you place an object in this view, it will be placed between the first two clicks in the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Saving and printing the project|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=825</id>
		<title>Placing text, arrows, symbols</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=825"/>
		<updated>2024-08-05T15:53:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing text, arrows, symbols&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PoseTexteFlèche1_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing text&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to display information about your scene, you have the option of placing text in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Place | Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will appear, where you can fill in your text and change the font or colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text will appear in the centre of your scene. You can then move it like any other object on InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an arrow&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow can help you highlight a space so that you can put text outside of the shape itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow is done via '''Place | Arrow'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first mouse click indicates the beginning of the arrow and the second indicates the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an elevation symbol&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXSbkuvFhaI&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqHmSy1Cn3UXngfTpALskqih&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elevation symbol is used to see and work on 2D elements from the front. There are three ways to see an element from the front : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Selecting an object (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Realistic or wireframe perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Selecting a wall (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Wireframe or realistic elevation'''. By double clicking on walls, you will immediately be put into the realistic perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Placing an elevation symbol, which will allow you to elevate an object or a group of objects, and then via '''View | Wireframe or realistic view'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to place this elevation symbol, you must click on the '''Place''' button and then '''Elevation symbol''' in the ensuing drop down menu. It takes three clicks to place it: the two first to define the elevation area and the third one to determine the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SymboleEval1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you place an object in this view, it will be placed between the first two clicks in the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Saving and printing the project|Next step]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=824</id>
		<title>Placing text, arrows, symbols</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=824"/>
		<updated>2024-08-05T15:52:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Placing text, arrows, symbols&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PoseTexteFlèche1_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing text&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to display information about your scene, you have the option of placing text in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Place | Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will appear, where you can fill in your text and change the font or colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text will appear in the centre of your scene. You can then move it like any other object on InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an arrow&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow can help you highlight a space so that you can put text outside of the shape itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow is done via '''Place | Arrow'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first mouse click indicates the beginning of the arrow and the second indicates the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an elevation symbol&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXSbkuvFhaI&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqHmSy1Cn3UXngfTpALskqih&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elevation symbol is used to see and work on 2D elements from the front. There are three ways to see an element from the front : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Selecting an object (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Realistic or wireframe perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Selecting a wall (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Wireframe or realistic elevation'''. By double clicking on walls, you will immediately be put into the realistic perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Placing an elevation symbol, which will allow you to elevate an object or a group of objects, and then via '''View | Wireframe or realistic view'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to place this elevation symbol, you must click on the '''Place''' button and then '''Elevation symbol''' in the ensuing drop down menu. It takes three clicks to place it: the two first to define the elevation area and the third one to determine the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SymboleEval1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you place an object in this view, it will be placed between the first two clicks in the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Saving and printing the project|Next route]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=823</id>
		<title>Placing text, arrows, symbols</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://en.wiki.insitu.education/index.php?title=Placing_text,_arrows,_symbols&amp;diff=823"/>
		<updated>2024-08-05T15:52:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Julien: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;div id=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;table width=&amp;quot;100%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td width=&amp;quot;80%&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h1 class=&amp;quot;title_page&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Understanding the Place window&amp;lt;/h1&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:PoseTexteFlèche1_FR.gif|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing text&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to display information about your scene, you have the option of placing text in InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do so, go to '''Place | Text'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A window will appear, where you can fill in your text and change the font or colour. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The text will appear in the centre of your scene. You can then move it like any other object on InSitu. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an arrow&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow can help you highlight a space so that you can put text outside of the shape itself. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Placing an arrow is done via '''Place | Arrow'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The first mouse click indicates the beginning of the arrow and the second indicates the end. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;big&amp;gt;Placing an elevation symbol&amp;lt;/big&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadrevideo&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;youtube width=&amp;quot;500&amp;quot; height=&amp;quot;300&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cXSbkuvFhaI&amp;amp;list=PL7MrU2icgiqHmSy1Cn3UXngfTpALskqih&amp;amp;index=3&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/youtube&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Voir le tutoriel vidéo&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The elevation symbol is used to see and work on 2D elements from the front. There are three ways to see an element from the front : &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1 - Selecting an object (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Realistic or wireframe perspective'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2 - Selecting a wall (clicking on the inner edge), then going to '''View | Wireframe or realistic elevation'''. By double clicking on walls, you will immediately be put into the realistic perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3 - Placing an elevation symbol, which will allow you to elevate an object or a group of objects, and then via '''View | Wireframe or realistic view'''. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to place this elevation symbol, you must click on the '''Place''' button and then '''Elevation symbol''' in the ensuing drop down menu. It takes three clicks to place it: the two first to define the elevation area and the third one to determine the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div align=&amp;quot;center&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;cadreimg&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SymboleEval1_FR.png|link=]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you place an object in this view, it will be placed between the first two clicks in the depth. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- fin contenu --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;td valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;20%&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{:En_Concevoir}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnretour&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[#top|Back top of page]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;span class=&amp;quot;btnhome&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[Saving and printing the project|Next route]]&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Julien</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>